+ All Categories
Home > Documents > ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product...

ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product...

Date post: 12-Mar-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 16 times
Download: 2 times
Share this document with a friend
67
Public ITM208 Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content in SAP Solution Manager 7.2
Transcript
Page 1: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

ITM208 ndash Activate SAP Solution Manager 71

SOLAR Content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 2Public

Speakers

Bangalore October 5 - 7

Wulff-Heinrich Knapp

Las Vegas Sept 19 - 23

Tim Steuer

Barcelona Nov 8 - 10

Sinje Seidler

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public

Disclaimer

The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of

SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or

any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this

presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein

This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms

directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice

The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality

This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied

warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational

purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this

presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence

All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially

from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only

as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public

Agenda

bull SAP Solution Manager 72

bull Where does the content go

bull Get ready today

bull Activate

bull Available services

Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 2: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 2Public

Speakers

Bangalore October 5 - 7

Wulff-Heinrich Knapp

Las Vegas Sept 19 - 23

Tim Steuer

Barcelona Nov 8 - 10

Sinje Seidler

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public

Disclaimer

The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of

SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or

any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this

presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein

This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms

directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice

The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality

This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied

warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational

purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this

presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence

All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially

from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only

as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public

Agenda

bull SAP Solution Manager 72

bull Where does the content go

bull Get ready today

bull Activate

bull Available services

Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 3: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 3Public

Disclaimer

The information in this presentation is confidential and proprietary to SAP and may not be disclosed without the permission of

SAP Except for your obligation to protect confidential information this presentation is not subject to your license agreement or

any other service or subscription agreement with SAP SAP has no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this

presentation or any related document or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein

This presentation or any related document and SAPs strategy and possible future developments products and or platforms

directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice

The information in this presentation is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality

This presentation is provided without a warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied

warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non-infringement This presentation is for informational

purposes and may not be incorporated into a contract SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this

presentation except if such damages were caused by SAPrsquos intentional or gross negligence

All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially

from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only

as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public

Agenda

bull SAP Solution Manager 72

bull Where does the content go

bull Get ready today

bull Activate

bull Available services

Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 4: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 4Public

Agenda

bull SAP Solution Manager 72

bull Where does the content go

bull Get ready today

bull Activate

bull Available services

Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 5: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Why do we talk about Activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 6: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 6Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 7: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 7Public

SAP Solution Manager 72Optimal for your digital business transformation

Launchpad Apps

and Dashboards

Transparent

requirements to deploy

On-Premise Hybrid

and Cloud Solutions

SAP Solution Manager

on SAP HANA

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

One Process Landscape

for Business and IT

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 8: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 8Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITBig picture

State-of-the-Art Business Process Modelling in SAP Solution Manager 72

covers the whole lifecycle of a solution

DesignTo-be processes amp

requirements

BuildAgile requirements

fulfillment

RunContinuous improvement

based on real usageDigital

Transformation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 9: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 9Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITProcess Management in SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager solution documentation

Web-based documentation experience

Integrated BPMN process editor

Multi-level hierarchies (more than three)

Processes assembled from re-use libraries

Processes are validated and optimized continuously

based on real usage

Integrated process experience

Requirements Management

IT Project and Portfolio Management integration

Change and Request Management integration

Test Management integration

Business Process Monitoring integration

Today customers are challenged with synchronizing business models and processes with

IT solution documentation across build and run

Integrated graphical BPMN process editor

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 10: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 10Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITNew Business Process Monitoring application

See the status of the last data collection for your

business processes in a simplified tabular display

optionally per step or interface

In addition you can see a graphical

representation of your business process flow

This makes use of the new process graphic from

the solution documentation

From both screens you can navigate to the details

of the collected metrics (eg last measured value

or detail list)

Process Management and Process Monitoring share the same foundation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 11: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 11Public

Process Management

Demo

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 12: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

Where does the content goHow to find your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 13: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 13Public

One Process Landscape for Business and ITThe new ldquoSolutionrdquo

Process Content

The solution is the sum of a companyrsquos systems applications

and processes It acts as a container for versions of solution

documentation one of which is the production version

Project

IT project management with a full project management

suite ndash integrated into SAP Solution Manager processes

Well-defined

transition of entities

SOLAR

Project

amp

Solution

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 14: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 14Public

Project InformationWhere does all of the data go after activation

SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN and SOLAR01

System Landscape -gt Tcode SOLADM

Attributes -gt Tcode SOLDOC

Project team Milestones -gt IT PPM

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 15: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 15Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72Scope team members milestones etc

2 Choose project

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt My Projects tile

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 16: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 16Public

I need to find my 72 solution documentation NOWWhere is it

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Documentation tile

You can also access the solution documentation

directly via tcode SOLDOC

Process structure has links to elements such as

documents IMG objects test cases and transactions

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 17: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 17Public

Wherersquos the project information in SAP Solution Manager 72System landscape data

Use Tcode solman_workcenter or Launchpad link -gt

Project and Process Management -gt Solution

Administration tile

You can also access the solution administration

directly via tcode SOLADM

This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 18: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

Upgrade to 72Getting from SAP Solution Manager 71 to SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 19: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 19Public

SAP Solution Manager 72 Release schedule

H22015 H12016

Ramp-Up Go To Release

End

20172025

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 20: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 20Public

What happens when you upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Key developmentsbull Process Management incl BPMN 20 modeling

bull Release Management

bull Project Management

Fiori meets SAP Solution Managerbull SAP Solution Manager launchpad for personalized

user experience

bull Fiori Apps for dedicated use cases

Upgrade to SAP HANA as a databasebull License for SAP Solution Manager included in support contract

bull Migrate SAP HANA to consolidate all applications on SAP

HANA

bull Build up experience in running SAP HANA

Receive mainstream maintenance beyond

2017bull Packaged corrections (notes support packages)

bull Technology updates (new databases and operating

systems)

Upgrade to new functionality

Upgrade to latest technology

Upgrade User Experience

Upgrade to new maintenance interval

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 21: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 21Public

SAP Solution Manager on SAP HANA Technical stack view

The upgrade from SAP Solution Manager 71 to 72 is a standard procedure

Stack Splitbull SAP Solution Manager 72

runs 2 single stacks

bull Split is done after upgrade

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 22: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 22Public

Upgrade impact

Scenario Details of Impact Impact

Project Management Project Management capabilities are similar between 71 and 72 Low

IT Service Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Landscape Management Simplification (Maintenance Planner can also be adopted without upgrade more consistent handling of

landscape entities with removal of the product system)Low

Data Volume Management No disruption to 71 functionality innovation can be adopted at own pace Low

Application Operations No disruption to 71 functionality significant renovation of user experience (UI5 instead of flash) No

architecture changes in Monitoring and Alerting infrastructureMedium

Change Control Management Simplified landscape concept to be implemented (Logical component groups) included in content

activationMedium

Custom Code Management Complete redesign of technical infrastructure migration wizard execution is required Medium

Process ManagementComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required additional innovation can be

adopted at own paceHigh

Test Management Complete redesign of Solution Documentation and assigned test cases Content Activation required no

upgrade of existing Test Plans High

Business Process OperationsComplete redesign of Solution Documentation Content Activation required adoption of Monitoring and

Alerting infrastructure requiredHigh

Low effort No to minimal training and configuration effort almost a non-event can be treated as small change

Medium effort Some training effort configuration changes required can be treated as minor release

High effort Full training and configuration required needs to be treated as major release

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 23: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

Get ready todayHow to prepare for SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 24: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 24Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a free trial system

Two solutions are available one for evaluation of a customerrsquos own

71 solution documentation in the new 72 system and another for

evaluation of SAP S4HANA Best Practice content

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 90 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72

successAmazon Web Services charges apply

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 25: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 25Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in the CloudCAL images for your use cases around SAP Solution Manager

I want to try out

content activation

before I upgrade

Version 72

customer content

upload possible

Activation on CAL

I want to try out SAP

Solution Manager 72

capabilities

Version 72

Simple demos +

SAP S4HANA

Packages

Demo on CAL

I want to jumpstart my

SAP S4HANA

implementation

Version 72 + SAP

S4HANA 1511 fully-

activated managed

system

Simple demos + SAP

S4HANA Packages

incl connected system

Jumpstart on CAL

I want to test drive

Focused capabilities on

SAP Solution Manager

Version 71

FS + pre-

configured + test

data

Focused Solutions

on CAL

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 26: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 26Public

Experience SAP Solution Manager 72 in CALTest-drive for a nominal fee in your own private cloud with personalization

SAP Solution Manager product management plans to make SAP

Solution Manager 72 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance

Library (CAL) as a demo system by the start of ramp-up

SAP plans to preload the 72 appliance with helpful sample

projects which customers can use for their evaluation and

activation efforts

SAP provides the powerful appliance without CAL charges

Customers only need an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account to

test drive the SAP Solution Manager cloud appliance for as a free

trial for 30 days Longer options are available at cost

SAP CAL ndash Your Highway to SAP Solution Manager 72 success

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 27: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 27Public

Activation starts today

For SAP Solution Manager customers we offer

Quick identification of those parts of your solution documentation which matter to you

Decision support to plan and execute content activation

Best practices services and tools for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Unparalleled special upgrade support for SAP Solution Manager 72

Start preparing Select whatrsquos right Know the impact

Upgrade preparation services are available today Your journey starts today

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 28: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 28Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(13)

Keep your business process structure simple

The business process structure in SAP Solution Manager 71 is limited to the three levels ldquoScenariordquo ndash

ldquoBusiness Processrdquo ndash ldquoBusiness Process Steprdquo If you needed more than three levels SAP AGS best

practices recommended circumventing this restriction with naming conventions eg ldquolevel 5 -gt level 4 -gt

scenariordquo

If you use these naming conventions do not change anything in SAP Solution Manager 71 You can

changed the additional levels into regular folders manually after upgrading to SAP Solution Manager

72

Assign executables on process step level

To ensure a smooth transition and reduce post-activation effort assign test cases and one executable

(transactionreport etc) on process step level wherever possible to ensure correct functioning of Test

Management Business Process Monitoring and other SAP Solution Manager capabilities

Executable variants

The executable variants concept in SAP Solution Manager 71 let you add variants to an executable

attached to a process step In SAP Solution Manager 72 executable variants will be represented by

single process steps (one step for each variant) Executable variants will be converted into single

process steps during content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 29: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 29Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(23)

Deprecated SAP attributes

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the set of SAP attributes has been cleaned up and reduced so the attributes listed below will no

longer be available If you use them now and want to retain them after the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72 you can

convert them into customer attributes during content activation

Structure element attributes

Industry Component Template ID Custom Development SAP Modification SAP with Enhancement SAP Standard ESR

Assignment Key BPMS Assignment Key Keywords

Assignment attributes

Keywords Is Default Processing Type Ext Test Tool relevant

Document attributes

Blueprint-Relevant Duration Technical Name Business Partner General Documentation End User Documentation Ext Test

Tool Solution Builder Key Solution Package ID

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 30: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 30Public

Minimize activation effort ldquoSmart documentrdquo your solution today

(33)

Tag your copied projects

This information is only relevant for customers who regularly create copies of projects to keep a snapshot of a project

This is not generally recommended because it greatly increases the number of projects in SAP Solution Manager The result

may be that projects which are not required are activated during content activation Customers may then have to invest in

unnecessary post-activation clean-up activities

If you need to take project snapshots in SAP Solution Manager label them as not activation-relevant using a naming

convention Project-based archiving capabilities are planned for a later functional enhancement of SAP Solution Manager 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 31: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 31Public

Ensure a smooth transition CIM model and CR content

Keep your CIM model and CR content up to date

SAP provides product information and landscape data via updates of the CIM model (Common Information Model) and CR

content (Component Repository content)

In preparation of the content activation SAP recommends to update CIM model and CR content before the actual upgrade to

SAP Solution Manager 72 Otherwise updating the CIM model and CR content has to be performed during the mandatory post-

upgrade activities and can be quite time-consuming

You can find more information in SAP note 1701770 (LMDB CIM model and CR Content prerequisite) and in SAP note 669669

(Update of SAP System Component Repository in SLD)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 32: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 32Public

Clean up and organize

To ensure a smooth transition clean up your existing solution documentation

bull Clean up bdquodead-endldquo shortcuts which point to elements that no longer exist

bull Use report AI_DIR_STRUCTURE_NO_LOGCOMP to find process steps which have no logical

component assigned and assign a logical component to them (or remove the steps)

bull Use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_ARCHIVE to archive old versions of KW documents

Alternatively you can use report SOLMAN_DOCU_VERSION_DEL to delete old versions of KW

documents This step is optional to free up database space

Please note KW documents which are not assigned to any structure object will not be activated

They will no longer be accessible after content activation You can use report

SOLMAN_UNUSED_DOCUMENTS to find unassigned KW documents

Implementation of corrections from SAP Note 1360988 and 1360436 necessary

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 33: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 33Public

Collect information amp plan the activation

Evaluate your existing projects amp solutions

The ldquooverview report for projects and solutionsrdquo gives you an overview of your existing projects and solutions in SAP Solution

Manager 71 It will help you to identify projects relevant for activation and projects which can be discontinued or deleted The

information from the report will help you to prepare content activation and reducing the effort required The report can be

downloaded via SAP Note 2161244

Prepare the content activation in advance

The guided procedure in transaction PREPARE_ACTIVATION helps you to define the activation scope before you start the

activation process It also helps you to understand and plan the future logical component group design and to align it within your

company The execution of this procedure is a prerequisite of content activation It will not change existing data in your SAP

Solution Manager 71 system

PREPARE_ACTIVATION is available in SAP Note 2161244

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 34: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 34Public

Tool Cross-project solutions overview report

The cross-project solutions report provides a comprehensive overview to evaluate existing

projects

The report shows a list of projects and solutions with additional information

bull Is process documentation included

bull Are links to other applications included (ChaRM ndash open task lists ITPPM Project QGM BP Monitoring)

bull Number of assigned roadmaps (for projects)

bull Number of structure elements

bull Number of assignments on the tabs

bull Last change date of a structure element

bull Last change date of a document

How can I define the perfect scope for the content activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 35: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 35Public

Project solutions overview report sample report result

The report provides various

information on all projects and

solutions of your SAP Solution

Manager 71 system

The main purpose is to support

the decision process if a project

solution has to be included in the

scope for content activation or not

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 36: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 36Public

Landscape Scenarios Overview

In SAP Solution Manager 72 the Logical Component concept

has been completely overhauled

The following Best Practices show how the new Logical

Component Groups should be modeled depending on the

general setup of your system landscape

Please see the Content Activation Guide for the description of

further landscape scenarios

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 37: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 37Public

New concept Logical Component Groups

Logical Component Group

bull describes a group of systems which belong together

bull consists of logical components which describe the individual tracks of a system landscape

Logical Component Group (ie ERP)

Logical Component

(ie Development)

Logical Component

(ie Maintenance)MAINT QAS PRD

DEV TST

Example

The example shows a dual-track landscape with a

maintenance track and a development track

The maintenance track supports the productive system

while the development track is used for preparing a new

release

In a single-track landscape the logical component group

would comprise only one logical component

Advantages of Logical Component Groups (compared to SAP Solution Manager 71)

bull Synchronization of solution documentation and change request management

bull Easier handling due to the removal of the product assignment

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 38: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 38Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Single Track)

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

ldquoA logical component refers to the

concrete technical systems of a

system track typically belonging to

the same transport landscape and

having the same product version

The technical systems assigned to

logical components are classified

according to their system role eg

development system quality

assurance systemrdquo

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 39: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 39Public

SAP Solution Manager Landscape DesignBest-practice approach Logical Component Group (Dual Trackn+1)

Development Systems

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Logical Component Group ERP

Logical Component Production

Logical Component Maintenance

Logical Component Development

Logical Component Design

Maintenance Systems

Production Systems

Sandbox Systems

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 40: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 40Public

Best-Practice Approach for

Branch Setup of Solution Documentation

Production

PRD

Maintenance

DEV amp QAS

Development

DEV amp QAS

Design

Sandbox

Import

Sandbox

= Change Request Management controlled

As-is solution

To-be solution

Fix amp Enhance Innovate

System SBX-100

Role Sandbox

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DD1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS02

System QD1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS02

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS02

System DM1-100

Role Development

Version S4HANA FPS01

System QM1-100

Role Quality Assurance

Version S4HANA FPS01

System PP1-100

Role Production

Version S4HANA FPS01

Cut-over

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 41: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

ActivateEnable your SOLAR content in SAP Solution Manager 72

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 42: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

DemoPrepare activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 43: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 43Public

Entry screen

After calling transaction

PREPARE_ACTIVATION the entry

screen describes the details of the

following guided procedure

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 44: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 44Public

Step 1 Scope of Content Activation

In the first step you need to select

the projects and solutions which you

want to take over into the new

solution documentation environment

Additionally you need to choose if

you want to take over additional

content for related applications

(ChaRM QGM ITPPM etc)

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 45: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 45Public

Step 1 Consistency check

Before going to the next step there is

a consistency check You will be

informed about potential issues or

problems which should be solved

during the preparation phase This

will reduce risks in the activation

phase later on

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 46: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 46Public

Step 2 System landscape for 72

Step 2 provides a proposal for the

newly created logical component

groups This is based on the logical

components from the selection of

projects and solutions from step 1

and based on data from your system

landscape

In this step you should rename the

groups to a more meaningful name

You also assign for which solution

the logical component group is

assigned

You can also move logical

components between groups

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 47: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 47Public

Step 3 Target branches and remote sources

In step 3 you need to decide for

every scoped project and solution to

which branch the content of the

respective project should be moved

You also need to make that decision

for other elements like Test Cases

and Technical Objects

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 48: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 48Public

Step 3 Consistency check

Before step 4 there is another

consistency check to help you

identifying potential risks for the

activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 49: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 49Public

Step 4 Summary

Step 4 shows a summary of your

activities

Until you push the button ldquoClose

Preparationrdquo in this step you move

back and forth between the steps to

change your settings

After closing the preparation no

changes are possible anymore

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 50: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

DemoExecute activation

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 51: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 51Public

Enter SOLMAN_SETUP

After calling transaction

SOLMAN_SETUP you can enter the

guided procedure for content activation

by using the link ldquoSolution Documentation

Content Activationrdquo

The guided procedure will open in a new

browser window

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 52: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 52Public

Step 1 Get started

In step 1 you verify that the prerequisites

for the content activation procedure are

met

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 53: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 53Public

Step 2 Activate content

In step 2 the content activation activities

are executed automatically

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 54: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 54Public

Step 3 Close activation

In step 3 you finish the content

activation procedure Afterwards you

are ready to work with your content

that has been transferred to the new

solution documentation environment

in SAP Solution Manager 72

Important remark This action can

not be reverted and you cannot

change anything in the guided

procedure after closing it

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 55: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

Public

Available servicesOfferings from the SAP Support Academy and SAP Education

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 56: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 56Public

SAP Enterprise Support AcademyHow to get ready for successful end-to-end solution operations

Accelerated innovation

enablement

Best practices

Technical set-up Process Strategy Process Implementation amp Operation

Homepage httpsupportsapcomesacademy

Expert-guided implementation

Meet-the-expert sessions

QuickIQs

Guided self-services

Value maps

The SAP Enterprise Support Academy provides specially tailored expert

content which helps you get the most out of your SAP Solution Manager installation

DIGITAL

BUSINESS

SAP S4HANA

Digital Industries

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 57: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 57Public

Schedule Knowledge Transfer Products

GA Ramp Up

Meet the

Expert

Best Practices

in Upgrading

71 72

Dec 2015 Jan 2016

Guided

Discovery

Tutorial (GDT)

Experience 72

comparison and

simulation

Summer 2016

EGI

1 Upgrade to 72

2 Content Activation

Full Portfolio

EGI for 72

Cloud Offering to practice 72 eg Content Activation incl Best Practices

Class Room

Training 72

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 58: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 58Public

Current GDT Overview

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 59: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 59Public

Solution

Documentation amp

Implementation

EGI sessions for SAP Solution Manager 72

FoundationBuild SAP Like a Factory amp

Application Lifecycle ManagementRun SAP Like a Factory

Available

SAP Solution Manager

Roadmap

Basic Configuration of

SAP Solution Manager

Roles amp Authorization

Concept

Solution Documentation

I Basic Initial Upload

Verification

Solution Documentation

II Reverse Process

Documentation

Solution Implementation

Setup Remote Support

Component (SAP

Business-Objects BI 3)

SAP Solution Manager

configuration for SAP

Business Objects BI 4

Change Control

Management

Change Control

Management I CTS+

Change Control

Management II Quality

Gate Management

Change Control

Management III Change

Request Management

Incident and

Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management

Incident and Problem

Management for VARs

Maintenance

Optimization amp

Security

Configuration Validation

Custom Development

Management Cockpit

Business Process

Operations

Business Process

Monitoring amp

Stabilization

Job Scheduling

Management

Application

Operations

System Monitoring amp

Reporting

End-User Experience

Monitoring Reporting

Analytics

Data Volume

Management

Methodology and

Infrastructure

Business Intelligence

Monitoring and

Troubleshooting

Integration Monitoring

SAP HANA Monitoring

and Troubleshooting

Test

Management

Test Management I

SAP Test Workbench

Test Management II

Business Process

Change Analyzer

Test Management IV

Component Based Test

Automation (CBTA)

E2E Root Cause

Analysis

Scope and Effort

Analyzer

ALM Jump Start

Guided Procedures

SAP IT Infrastructure

Management

Available

Content Activation 72

In development

Technical Upgrade 72

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 60: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 60Public

Planned Trainings for SAP Solution Manager 72

E2E120

System Monitoring

E2E100=gtE2E110

Application Operations

E2E300 Business

Process Integration and

Automation

SMI310=gt E2E600

Implementation Projects

Solution Documentation amp

Implementation

E2E200 Change Control

Management

E2E220

Test Management Change Test amp

Release Management

Business Process

Operations

Application

Operations

Incident Problem amp

Request Management

Portfolio amp Project

Management

E2

E0

40

Ma

na

ge

Dig

ita

l Tra

ns

form

ati

on

w

ith

SA

P S

4

HA

NA

wit

h

SA

P S

olu

tio

n M

an

ag

er

SM250 Setup ITSM

SM100 Operations and

Configuration

How to Configure How to Use

SM255 Setup Change

Management

Planned

Services

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 61: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 61Public

Content Activation Guide

To prepare your Content Activation it is strongly recommended

to carefully read the Content Activation guide

This guide also contains Best Practices descriptions for

Content Activation scenarios

You can download the latest version of the guide here

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 62: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 62Public

Important information for the upgrade to SAP Solution Manager 72

Please carefully evaluate SAP Note 2227300

when preparing the upgrade to SAP Solution

Manager 72

This note provides comprehensive information

on the upgrade in addition to the SAP Solution

Manager Master Guide

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 63: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 63Public

Further information on SAP Solution Manager

General overview

httpsupportsapcomsolutionmanager

Focused solutions overview

httpsupportsapcomfocused

Documentation

httphelpsapcomsolutionmanager72

Learning Maps and Guided Discovery Tutorials

httpsupportsapcomekt-solutionmanager

SCN

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSolution+Manager+Home

Discussions

httpsscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

Prepare today

httpswikiscnsapcomwikidisplaySMSAP+Solution+Manager+72+Content+Activation

Technical info

httpsappssupportsapcomsapsupportpamhash=pvnr3D0120061532090000606726pt3Dg257Cd

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 64: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 64Public

SAP TechEd Online

Continue your SAP TechEd

education after the event

Access replays of

Keynotes

Demo Jam

SAP TechEd live interviews

Select lecture sessions

Hands-on sessions

hellip

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 65: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 65Public

Further information

Related SAP TechEd sessions

IFL206-ASUG SAP Solution Manager Influence Council - Whats New with 72

ITM100 - IT Management in Action A Guided Demo Through SAP Solution Manager 72

ITM113 - Test-Drive SAP Solution Manager in SAP Cloud Appliance Library

ITM260 - Applying SAP Solution Manager 72 Best Practices to Implement SAP S4HANA

ITM263 - Focused Build for SAP Solution Manager Agile Requirements

TEC120 - SAP Solution Manager Road Map and Strategic Direction for 72 and Beyond

SAP Public Web

httpscnsapcomcommunityit-managementalmsolution-manager

httpssupportsapcomsolution-managerhtml

httpgosapcomproducttechnology-platformsolution-managerhtml

SAP Education and Certification Opportunities

wwwsapcomeducation

Watch SAP TechEd Online

wwwsaptechedcomonline

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 66: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 66Public

Please complete your

session evaluation for

ITM208

Contact information

Tim SteuerProgram Leadtimsteuersapcom

Feedback

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions

Page 67: ITM208 – Activate SAP Solution Manager 7.1 SOLAR Content · SAP Solution Manager product management has made SAP Solution Manager 7.2 available in the SAP Cloud Appliance Library

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved 67Public

copy 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate

company) in Germany and other countries Please see httpwwwsapcomcorporate-enaboutlegalcopyrightindexhtml for additional trademark information and notices

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors

National product specifications may vary

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP SE or its

affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and

services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as

constituting an additional warranty

In particular SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation or to develop

or release any functionality mentioned therein This document or any related presentation and SAP SErsquos or its affiliated companiesrsquo strategy and possible future

developments products andor platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time

for any reason without notice The information in this document is not a commitment promise or legal obligation to deliver any material code or functionality All forward-

looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations Readers are cautioned not to place

undue reliance on these forward-looking statements which speak only as of their dates and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions


Recommended